JP2020080978A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To perform proper display control in response to a change of a game state.SOLUTION: A game machine is controllable to one of a plurality of kinds of performance modes (for example, a low-probability/low-base state performance mode, a low-probability/high-base state performance mode, a high-probability/high-base state performance mode, and a high-probability/low-base state performance mode). Then, the game machine is controllable to a prescribed performance mode (for example, the low-probability/low-base state performance mode) for performing a variable display of decoration identification information (for example, a decoration symbol) in response to either of variable displays out of first identification information and second identification information in a non-specified state (for example, a low-probability/low-base state (normal state)), and also controllable to a particular performance mode (for example, the low-probability/high-base state performance mode) not displaying the decoration identification information in a specified state (for example, a low-probability/high-base state (a first 1KT state)).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-61

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "fluctuation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, a predetermined game value is given. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The prize value is to pay out the prize balls or give points or prizes according to the winning of the game balls in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and for the player. That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state where a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). It should be noted that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a gaming machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and the variable display can be executed in a game state different from the advantageous state. Some are controllably configured into states and non-specific states. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can fluctuate in parallel, and shifts to a firework rush (high probability non-time shortened state). Further, in the firework rush, the effect symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed, and after the firework rush is finished, the effect symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed.

JP, 2017-176585, A (paragraphs 0057, 0334, 0572, 0594).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the target of the variable display of the decoration identification information switches from one of the first identification information and the second identification information to the other in response to a change in the game state, the variable It is necessary to control the display result of the display so as not to mislead the player.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can realize appropriate display control in response to changes in the gaming state.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special information). Variable display execution means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S25A and S25B) capable of executing variable display of symbols in parallel, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game). State) controllable advantageous state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a specific state that is a gaming state different from the advantageous state and that can perform variable display ( For example, in a low probability/high base state (first KT state) and a non-specific state (for example, low probability/low base state (normal state)), specific state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) Step 082IWS69A to S74A, S69B to S74B, S2212 to S2214) and a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, low probability/low base state effect mode, low probability/high base state effect mode, high probability/high base). State production mode, high-probability/low-base state production mode), and a production mode control means capable of controlling in any production mode (for example, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes steps 082IWS963 to S965). The specific state control means can control the specific state based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 starts step 082IWS2212-). It is possible to control from a specific state to a non-specific state (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100) based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the variable display is completed 50 times). Steps 082IWS69A to S74A, S69B to S74B are executed), and the effect mode control means, in the non-specific state, the decoration identification information (corresponding to the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information). For example, it is possible to control to a predetermined effect mode (for example, a low probability/low base state effect mode) in which variable display of a decorative pattern is executed, and in a specific state, a special effect mode in which decoration identification information is not displayed (for example, It is characterized in that control is possible in a low probability/high base state effect mode). With such a configuration, appropriate display control can be realized in response to changes in the gaming state.

(Means 2) The means 1 is provided with decoration variable display means (for example, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes steps 171 to S173) capable of variably displaying decoration identification information (for example, a decorative pattern), and the decoration is variable. The display means can display the decoration identification information in the specific state when it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps S944 and S8105 according to the process table selected in step 082IWS908). , The re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 9-61(C) is executed). With such a configuration, the display result of the variable display can be appropriately notified even when the advantageous state is controlled even during the specific state.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, regardless of whether or not it is in a specific state, variable display of special identification information (for example, small symbol, fourth symbol) whose visibility is lower than the decoration identification information can be executed. The special variable display executing means (for example, the portion of the CPU 120 for effect control which executes steps 082IWS207 and S208) may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the game situation regardless of the game state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 4, special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state Special portion control means (eg, a portion that executes steps S126 to S128 in 100) and special state control means (for example, a high probability/low base state (second KT state)) in which a game value is likely to be imparted due to the special state (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to include (a part that executes steps 082IWS2204 to S2208). According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by controlling to the specific state.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the advantageous state control means has a plurality of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 2R regular big hit). Controllable to the advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, irregular fluctuation) of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. In addition, a special effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps 082IWS558 and S563 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a common special effect (for example, a special big hit display) regardless of the type of advantageous state is provided. The decoration identification information may not be displayed during execution of (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 082IWS559 and S564). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding when the advantageous control is performed based on the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information.

(Means 6) In the means 5, the advantageous state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. Can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the processing of steps S122 to S125 after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in steps 082IWS2014A and S2014B), and the specific display is executed after the special effect is executed. In response to the result being derived and displayed, a promotion effect executing means capable of executing a promotion effect (for example, a launch promotion notification) that prompts the player to perform an action (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 082IWS624). May be provided. With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to appropriately prompt the player's operation.

(Means 7) In the means 5 or 6, the advantageous state control means is in the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed the specific area (for example, the passage gate 41) after the special effect is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute step 082IWS2504 when Y in step 082IWS2501 to execute the processing of steps S122 to S125). . With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the advantageous state can be appropriately controlled.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, a variable display period determining means capable of determining the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). In the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) and the second variation pattern setting process), the variable display period determination means, the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information according to the gaming state. As the variable display period of the variable display of the second identification information, different variable display periods are determined at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol). There is a variation pattern in which variation time is set differently for the symbols, and the variation pattern is determined at different rates for the first special symbol and the second special symbol). .. With such a configuration, the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be appropriately determined according to the game state.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character part control process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 082IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 082IW. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a big hit opening. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is the flowchart which shows the concrete example of production control main processing in the feature section 082IW. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows the indication production processing when over winning a prize. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an over-winning suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a suggestion process at the time of small winning. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a small hit winning suggestive effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows prize number display suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prize sphere number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows a prize sphere emphasis production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a special symbol. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pre-reading notice production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is a flow chart which shows irregular fluctuation corresponding processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect in a low probability/high base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect in a high probability/high base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect in a high probability/low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect in a high probability/low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect in a high probability/low base state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a pre-reading notice production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right hitting indicator 26 is provided for urging a right hitting operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7, in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win a prize (also called an open state) and the game ball cannot win a prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit design) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special variable winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared to the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball into the special winning opening to get the winning ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball to the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening mode (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the special winning opening and a plurality of types of game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to carry out a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol is "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or a point of the frame LED 9 is displayed. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is displayed by turning on the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the game machine outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-hand hitting test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored in the first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation processing, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, there may be small hits in the variable display of the second special symbols which are controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern, etc., resulting in a discomfort for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than that in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state, as in the above small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop process, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. When the display result is "big hit", setting processing for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the variation of the second special symbol is changed. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 in accordance with the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is monitored, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this big hit opening process, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are determined. It includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , The big hit opening process is ended.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes control, KT control, processing for performing various settings for starting high base control, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pretreatment ends.

The small hitting open process of step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 082IW)
Next, the characteristic part 082IW will be described. First, a game state in the characteristic unit 082IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic part 082IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this characteristic part 082IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and even if a small hit occurs. There are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic part 082IW, the probability of hitting a normal figure is the same regardless of the game state, but the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol varies is non-KT in the KT state. It is shorter than the state (normal state), and the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time than the non-KT state (normal state). And, while there is no case where it is determined as a small hit when the first special symbol is changed, it is configured so that it can be decided as a small hit when the second special symbol is changed (however, if it is forcibly lost as described later). Therefore, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, in the case of the KT state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is made higher than that of the non-KT state (normal state), so that the KT state may be a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. ..

In addition, in the characteristic part 082IW, the time required from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in the characteristic part 082IW, and the game ball will pass in the first KT state described later. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic part 082IW. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 082IW108 formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game balls flow down, and in the jackpot gaming state, the bottom member 082IW108 is provided. By moving the bottom surface member 082IW108 backward toward the rear from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the front, the special winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the game ball winning in the special winning opening is further guided to a guide route 082IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 082IW100 is further branched into two routes 082IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 082IW100 is guided to the left route 082IW102 or the right route 082IW103. When guided to the left route 082IW102, the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 082IW106. When guided to the right path 082IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 082IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 082IW107.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a V area opening/closing plate 082IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left path 082IW102, and when the V area opening/closing plate 082IW101 is in an open state, a game led to the guide path 082IW100. The ball can enter the left route 082IW102 and enter the V area 082IW104. Further, when the V area opening/closing plate 082IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 082IW100 enters the right path 082IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 082IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V area opening/closing plate 082IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 082IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in the present feature section 082IW, when the big hit game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 082IW106 after the big hit game. Controlled to the probable state.

The total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 082IW106 and the discharge area switch 082IW107 during one round is equal to the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 082IW106 and the discharge area switch 082IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be configured to determine that there is a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error and notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the game balls won immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed to reach the V area 082IW104 and the discharge area 082IW105, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after that, it may be configured to determine that there is a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 9-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the present characteristic unit 082IW. In the present characterizing portion 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), a count switch (first counting switch). 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 082IW106 and the discharge area switch 082IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the characteristic part 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric auditors or the special winning opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83, the data is transmitted to the solenoid 082IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 082IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-3 and 9-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, FIG. 9-4 shows a big hit probability and a small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured such that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. It is possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the set value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability Regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state), there is no case where a small hit is determined when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-3(A) and 9(B), the deviation probabilities are made different between the set values “1” to “6”, so that the number of judgment values for each set value is matched. Is configured.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured to determine a small hit with a low probability even when performing variable display of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-4(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-4(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “31493/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values “1” to “6” different, the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). -3 and FIG. 9-4, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). , The outliers are different).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the deviation probability may be 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

Note that in FIGS. 9-3(A) and (B) and FIGS. 9-4(A) and (B), the probability of small hits is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the probability variation state (low probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability change state (low-probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Further, even if the set values are different values, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
9-5(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on a random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine either "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", or "10R certainty big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), in the characteristic part 082IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, 9% probability is determined as "10R probability variation big hit", 56% probability is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "6R normal variation jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5(B), in this characteristic part 082IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a probability of 10%, is determined to be a “10R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 50%, is determined to be a “6R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 5% to be a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and has a probability of 35% to be 2R normal big hit” is decided.

The "10R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 16 rounds and is shifted to a high-probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state of 6 rounds, and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big winning gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

In this characteristic part 082IW, when it becomes "10R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R regular big hit", a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds) elapses in each round of the big hit game. The special winning opening is controlled to be open until a certain number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 winning openings in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

In addition, in this characteristic part 082IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 9-26).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for the small hit determination. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this characteristic part 082IW, regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, when performing variable display of the second special symbol, 70% of The probability is determined as "small hit A", and the probability of 30% is determined as "small hit B". In this example, since the small hit is not determined when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol is not provided.

In this example, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game, and it is possible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening to some extent during the small hit game. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening can be expected most during the small hit game.

Further, in the present example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and the normal symbol is determined based on the determination result. The control for executing the variable display is performed. In this example, 99/100 is uniformly applied regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. With the probability of, it is decided to be a normal symbol. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set (in the high base state), the variable winning ball device 6B. Is controlled to the open state for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-7 to FIG. 9-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the characteristic part 082IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, seven types of first variation patterns #01 to #07 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when referred to as the variation pattern #n (n=0 to 07 or 01 to 34), it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-7(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #05.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in FIG. 9-7 (B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #06 to #07.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-8(C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern #02 is also determined when the small hit is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 2 minutes.

In this characteristic part 082IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening occurs. Will end up. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 082IW, the "frequency of occurrence of small hits" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variable time is changed even when it is a big hit. By making the length relatively long to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-8(D) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8(D), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is the deviation, the change time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second change pattern #04 of the shortened change is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change in the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 082IW, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is increased to actually make the special variable winning. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic part 082IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are provided before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning prize ball device 17 to the open state after allowing a sufficient time for all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member to drop, thereby enabling winning into the special winning opening, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability/first KT state, FIG. 9-8 ( The low probability/first KT shown in E) and the 2nd to 49th variation second special symbol variation pattern table are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-8(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the second KT state is the deviation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or the second fluctuation pattern #08 of the shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, which is even shorter, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability/the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the first KT state are deviations, the second fluctuation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small probability is determined as the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the low probability/first KT time and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 50th fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-8(F) are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16. Is decided.

In the characteristic part 082IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-8(F), when it is decided that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 with the end display for performing is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as “end of chance time!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined restoration display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 082IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, when it is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is set. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic part 082IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, it is possible to shift to the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol before frequent occurrence of forced deviation. It is configured.

Unlike the characteristic part 082IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state if the gaming machine is configured to force the second special symbol to fall off). May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-9(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 Is decided.

As in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9(G), the change time is also determined when the first change in the high probability/first KT state is a deviation. In some cases, the second variation pattern #17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for the second start winning opening opening preparation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(G), when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the big hit, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, if the variation display after the second variation is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that has triggered the high probability/first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, the high rate shown in FIG. The probability/first KT time and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28. Will be decided.

Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9(H), when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern #22 of shortening variation with a variation time of as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of shortening variation with a variation time of as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variable pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-9(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high-probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, when the second fluctuation pattern #30 of the normal fluctuation having the fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined, the second fluctuation pattern #31 of the normal fluctuation having the fluctuation time of 20 seconds may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern #33 of fluctuation may be determined. Also, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #34 of 2 minutes.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, a variation pattern in which different variation times are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided, and the first special symbol By the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the process process (step S25A) and the second variation pattern setting process in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), the first special symbol and the second The variation pattern is determined at a different rate for the special symbols.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on the random number for fluctuation pattern determination, and which fluctuation pattern is to be determined. 9-10, in order to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 9-9(I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-10, in this characteristic part 082IW, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing the variable display that is a small hit, Regardless of which of the set values is “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, is shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Direction control command)
9-11 and 9-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000(H) to 8007(H) and 8011(H) to 8032(H), the variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the image display device 5. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R probability variation big hit. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit A. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit B designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit B. ..

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic part 082IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but responds to each of 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, small hit, and out. The variation pattern command may be defined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is a production control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designating command) that designates the start of a big hit game. B001 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is a production control command (a special winning opening open display command) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies the display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning award designation command and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning award designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning-time determination result at the time of starting winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command (fluctuation category command) that indicates the variation result of the variation determination result of the winning determination result.

Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, the production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the above-mentioned production control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, 9-11 and the display state of the image display device 5 are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 9-12, and the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. In addition, production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Starting winning determination process)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. Of these, FIG. 9-13(A) shows a flowchart of the first start winning determination process (step S101A) executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). Further, FIG. 9-13(B) shows a flowchart of the second start winning determination process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B).

First, the first start winning a prize determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start prize determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start opening switch 22A is in the ON state (step 082IWS1211A). If the first starting opening switch 22A is not in the on state, the processing is ended as it is. If the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 082IWS1212A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 082IWS1213A). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Processing is performed (step 082IWS1214A). Note that a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning time determination process of previously determining the variation display result and the variation pattern when the variation based on the detected starting prize is subsequently executed (step 082IWS1215A). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 082IWS1216A), and controls to transmit the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 082IWS1217A). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning award designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS1218A).

Next, the second start winning determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-13(B). In the second start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the second start opening switch 22B is in the ON state (step 082IWS1211B). If the second starting opening switch 22B is not in the ON state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 082IWS1212B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 082IWS1213B). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second pending storage buffer. Processing is performed (step 082IWS1214B). Note that a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 082IWS1215B). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 082IWS1216B), and also controls to transmit the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 082IWS1217B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first effective start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS1218B).

(First special symbol normal processing)
9-14 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 082IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 082IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of first reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 082IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 082IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 082IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 082IWS55A. However, the setting changing processing (processing of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example.For example, the set value command may be transmitted at each end of the variable display, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the probability is low/non-KT state and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability/first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability/second KT state, and the high precision/second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 082IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big bonus of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 082IWS69A without performing the processing after step 082IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly disregarded regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 082IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of sync with the random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 082IWS59A to make a start winning prize. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 082IWS57A, without performing the processing of step 082IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) that is a deviation for the hit determination random number is set and set to a small value. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination is obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 082IWS58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 082IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 082IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 082IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty big hit, a 6R certainty big hit, or a 6R normal big hit based on the hit type determination random number (step 082IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 082IWS63A), step 082IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 082IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 082IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 082IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 082IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 082IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 082IWS68A). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS69A.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit determination value is not assigned, so it is determined as the small hit in the small hit determination process. There is no case where the processing of steps 082IWS66A to S68A is substantially executed.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is configured so as not to be determined as a small hit, so that the processing of steps 082IWS64A to S68A is not provided. You may comprise.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 082IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 082IWS75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 082IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 082IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 082IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 082IWS72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 082IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 082IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 082IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed, because it is a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 082IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 082IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 082IWS73A and S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state has ended, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

In this example, by performing the processing of step 082IWS74A and the processing of step 082IWS74B described later, the high base state due to the start of the fluctuation of either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortened state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. Or, in response to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation reduction state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 082IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 082IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 082IWS75A.

In addition, in the step 082IWS59A, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is under shortening control is set. It is confirmed (step 082IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 9-7). (See FIGS. 9-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-7(A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 082IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 082IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined in step 082IWS1701A, S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-7 is to be determined (step 082IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS1704A).

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 082IWS1703A, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 082IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 082IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 082IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
9-16 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 082IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Control for transmitting any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result. Perform (step 082IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 082IWS1122A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 082IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 082IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 082IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 082IWS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 082IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big-hit (step 082IWS1127A). .. Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process ends as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty variation big hit or a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 082IWS1128A). Whether or not the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 082IWS63A. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit or the 6R probability variation big hit, the process is ended as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 082IWS1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 082IWS1126A), either 10R probability big hit or 6R probability variable big hit Not accompanied (that is, 6R normal big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 082IWS1127A, N in step 082IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the CPU 120 for effect control to the first compulsory symbol. Control to transmit the confirmation designation command is performed (step 082IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 082IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 082IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If it is in the case of the normal big hit (in this example, 6R normal big hit) variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol With the second special design, the situation that a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 082IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 082IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 082IWS1120A, the processing in steps 082IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer in step 082IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is out of focus is being displayed. Also, the first special symbol variation process is finished as it is (see N in step 082IWS1127A). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a deviation, is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variable time timer When the update is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and the small hit game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 082IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 082IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability/first KT state, but the processing of steps 082IWS69A to S74A, S69B to S74B is executed, so that the 50th variation display is displayed. The low-probability/first KT state is ended when starting, and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and the processing of steps 082IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the operation is performed.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 082IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 082IWS1129A of the first special symbol fluctuation processing, regardless of the determination result at the time of fluctuation start, forced as the stop symbol of the first special symbol The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 082IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 082IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 082IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2018A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 082IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 082IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 082IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 082IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2027A.

In this example, since the small hit is not determined when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the processes of steps 082IWS2021A to S2026A are not substantially executed. Note that the processing of steps 082IWS2020A to S2026A may be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 082IWS2027A).

In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right hit notification for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

Also, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first start winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first reserved memory) You may comprise.

On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) of gaming balls is detected, a left hit notification may be performed.

The characteristic part 082IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demo is displayed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
9-18 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 082IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 082IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the second number of reserved storages is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. Stored in the second random number buffer area (step 082IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 082IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 082IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 082IWS55B. However, the setting changing process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designating command is the same as the processing shown in step 082IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 082IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 082IWS69B without performing the processing after step 082IWS58B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 082IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 082IWS59B, so that at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 082IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing of steps 082IWS58B to S63B and is small. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination is obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storing buffer (step 082IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 082IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 082IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 082IWS61B). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit (step 082IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 082IWS63B). ), and proceeds to step 082IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 082IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 082IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 082IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 082IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 082IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 082IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A or the small hit B (see FIG. 9-6(B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 082IWS69B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 082IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 082IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 082IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 082IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 082IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is being performed is reset (step 082IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 082IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS75B.

Then, in step 082IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 082IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 082IWS75B.

In addition, in step 082IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to be a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-15. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-15, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 082IWS1700A and confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-8(C). The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT is selected. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set or not, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of KT shown in FIGS. 9-8(D) to 9-9(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-8(D) If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-8(E) is selected, and if the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-8(F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-9(G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-9(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
9-19 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 082IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command, The display result 8 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 082IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 082IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 082IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 082IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 082IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 082IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small-hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is ended as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 082IWS1127B). .. Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 2R certainty variation big hit (step 082IWS1128B). .. Whether it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 2R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 082IWS63B. If it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the processing is finished as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 082IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 082IWS1126B), 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R certainty variation big hit (that is, a 2R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in step 082IWS1127B, N in step 082IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 082IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 082IWS1130B).

In this example, since the small hit is not determined when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the processes of steps 082IWS1127B to S1128B are not substantially executed. The processing of steps 082IWS1126B to S1128B may be omitted.

By performing the processing of steps 082IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature portion 082IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol The variable display is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 082IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

With the above configuration, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 082IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 082IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designating command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 082IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 082IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, regardless of the decision result at the time of the variation start, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 082IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 082IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 082IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2018B) and also controls to send the right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS2018B and S2019B, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 082IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 082IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 082IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 082IWS2023B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2024B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 082IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 082IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 082IWS2024B, S2025B, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in the present example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should have already been turned on when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 082IWS2023B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started overlappingly. Also, the process of transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 082IWS2027B).

(Normal processing for accessory control)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process processing. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 082IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 082IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 082IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 082IWS2104), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 082IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 082IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 082IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 082IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a big hit start designation command (step 082IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 082IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 082IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during big hit opening)
FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a big hit opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 082IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game balls that have won the special winning opening are detected, the CPU 103 counts the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 082IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 082IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 082IW106 is in the ON state (step 082IWS2404). If the V area switch 082IW106 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 082IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag that indicates that the game ball has entered the V area 082IW104. (Step 082IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 082IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening (step 082IWS2407), and the opening time timer after subtraction has timed out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 082IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 082IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 082IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. The game is stopped and the special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 082IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the CPU 120 for effect control (step 082IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 082IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening post-processing (step 082IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 082IWS2200), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 082IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). A value is set (step 082IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 082IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 082IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 082IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 082IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 082IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 082IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 082IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 10R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 082IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 082IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 082IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 082IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2215. In the case of 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/low base state (high Probability/second KT state).

If neither the 10R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 082IWS2209). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 082IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 082IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 082IWS2210), and further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 082IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2215. Therefore, if the 6R probability variation big hit, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 082IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 082IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process or step 082IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 082IWS70A or step 082IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 082IWS2212), and sets the special figure time saving flag. And shifts to the KT state (step 082IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 082IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 082IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 082IWS2300), and when the small hit end display timer is set, moves to step 082IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small hit end display timer to display a time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 082IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 082IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 082IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 082IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 082IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 082IWS2304). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lighting (step 082IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 controls to end the right-handed indicator 26 (step 082IWS2306), and at the same time, sends a right-handed illumination end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 082IWS2307).

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit in the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 082IWS2023B to S2025B). ), by executing the processing of steps 082IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 082IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic part 082IW will be described. FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition a game state in this characteristic unit 082IW. First, in the characteristic part 082IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area to perform a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, mainly a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-26, if a 10R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/after the big hit game ends. The state shifts to the low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if the 6R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 082IWS2212 to S2214).

When the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state) has been entered, in this feature 082IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when the big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly 10R certainty change big hit, 6R certainty change big hit, 2R certainty change big hit, or 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-26, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game. If so, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), and the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is entered, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic part 082IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability that the 6R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-5 ), once high probability/high. In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 082IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 9-26, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game. If so, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), and the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is entered, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 082IWS2212 to S2214). In this characteristic part 082IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-5(D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 35%. After the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, the result is shown in FIG. 9-26. As shown, a transition is made to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 082IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-26, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), a game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game. If so, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), and the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic part 082IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 10R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is 15 % (See FIGS. 9-5(D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also, in the case of a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is entered, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 082IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 082IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 9-26, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, if a 10R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). become. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-26, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-26, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-26, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 082IW104 during the big hit game, it will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

In this example, the KT state includes the first KT state and the second KT state. In the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state. The opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 changes). Even if a small hit occurs, a prize ball based on the prize at the special winning opening is hardly obtained. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, it is easy for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. It is easy to get a prize ball based on the winning of the prize.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 082IW. 9-27, the processing of steps 082IWS201 to S206 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fourth symbol process process (step 082IWS207). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 082IWS207, in the image display device 5, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbol, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 082IWS208). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 082IWS208, in the image display device 5, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The variable display of the small symbols on the left middle right is executed in synchronization.

In this example, as will be described later, the decorative pattern is erased during the low-probability/high-base state (however, the re-lottery effect may be executed in the case of a big hit). Even if the decorative pattern is deleted during the probability/high base state, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are executed.

Further, in this example, as will be described later, the decorative pattern is erased during the high-probability/low-base state, and the special pattern is temporarily stopped and confirmed. However, the decorative pattern is displayed during the high-probability/low-base state. Even when the symbol is deleted, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes irregular variation handling processing (step 082IWS209). In this example, as will be described later, during the non-KT state (normal state), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol is changed during the KT state. Corresponding to the display, the variable display of a reduced decorative pattern, which will be described later, is executed or a special pattern is displayed. However, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state or when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the KT state (hereinafter, also referred to as “irregular variation”), a big hit ( Hereinafter, also referred to as "irregular jackpot") may occur. In this example, the irregular variation handling process is executed to perform control to display a predetermined special jackpot display when an irregular jackpot occurs.

Next, the process of step 082IWS210 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG. 7.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-28 to 9-33 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 082IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 082IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 082IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 082IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 082IWS615).

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step 082IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 082IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 082IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step 082IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 082IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 082IWS621) ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 082IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 082IWS623). Whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step 082IWS620). If the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 ( Step 082 IWS 624).

Further, in this example, as will be described later, when the irregular big hit occurs, the special big hit display may be displayed on the image display device 5. When the special jackpot display is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the special jackpot display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS625), and is displaying the special jackpot display. A special jackpot display flag indicating that is set (step 082IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (step 082IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 082IWS628). In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to delete the launch promotion notification displayed on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS629). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 082IWS630).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure winning waiting process (step S173) (step 082IWS631). If the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure per-waiting process (Y in step 082IWS631), that is, if it is not an irregular big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 082IWS611.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (N in step 082IWS631), that is, if it is an irregular big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the big hit medium-sized effect. (Step 082IWS632). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 082IWS633), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the production component) is executed (step 082IWS634).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 082IWS635).

In this example, in the case of a normal big hit that is not irregular, control is performed to start displaying the number of prize balls displayed at the start of the big hit game (see steps 082IWS9709, S9710), but in the case of an irregular big hit Similarly, the display of the number of prize balls may be started.

If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (step 082IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 082IWS637). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 082IWS638).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 082IWS628 and S637.

It should be noted that, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display that is displayed during the big hit game, a set value suggesting effect that suggests the current set value may be executed. For example, when right-handed display is started in step 082IWS628, normally, right-handed display of a white display color is started, whereas when it is decided to execute the set value suggestive effect, the set value “1” is set. If the set value is “2”, the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "4", the right display of the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "5", the hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "6", the right hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. The right-handed display of the rainbow display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right hit display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game is finished, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display is changed and set at the timing of the big hit game end. You may comprise so that a value suggestion production may be performed.

Further, for example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low-probability/first KT state and the normal state (low-probability/low-base state) is entered, the left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. Thus, when the control of the game state is switched in some form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step 082IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 082IWS640).

If the received production control command is the small hit end designation command (step 082IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 082IWS642).

If the received production control command is the big winning opening opening display command (step 082IWS643), the production control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the big hit game round. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 082IWS644). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (that is, a round period during a big hit game) (step 082IWS645).

In this example, the process of step 082IWS644 is executed, so that the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the special winning opening open display command (the timing of starting the round), which is extremely rare. Even when an over-winning prize is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the special winning opening (step 082IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the special winning opening that specifies the interval period after opening the special winning opening. (Step 082IWS647).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 082IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 082IWS649).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 082IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 082IWS651).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command (step 082IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a blue background image (step 082IWS653). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state if set (step 082IWS654). Also, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state. If the sphere number counter is set, the value of the prize sphere number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 082IWS655).

In this example, during the big hit game (excluding the 2R certainty variation big hit and the big hit game based on the 2R regular big hit), a game ball is won in the big winning opening, or a special winning opening is played during the high probability/second KT state. Although the value of the prize ball number counter is cumulatively updated when a ball is won (see steps 082IWS670 and S677), the game state is at a low probability/ The value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the variable display is completed 50 times after the high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the low probability/low base state is entered.

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 082IWS656), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a low probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image) (step 082IWS657). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 082IWS658) and, if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state and the second probability indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 082IWS659).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 082IWS660), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, Display control is performed with a yellow background image) (step 082IWS661). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 082IWS662) and, if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 082IWS663).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designating command (step 082IWS664), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a red background image) (step 082IWS665). Moreover, the production control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 082IWS666), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 082IWS667).

If the received production control command is the special winning opening winning award designation command (step 082IWS668), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is in the big hit game based on the 10R certainty jackpot, the 6R certainty jackpot, or the 6R regular jackpot. (Step 082IWS669). Whether or not the big hit game based on the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 6R normal big jackpot is being played, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is the big hit medium effect processing (step S176) to ending effect processing (step S177). ) Is displayed, and whether the display result specification commands stored in the display result specification command storage area are display result 2 specification command to display result 4 specification command It can be determined by

During the big hit game based on the 10R sure change big hit, the 6R sure change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 082IWS670). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 082IWS671). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS668 to S671, in the present example, a prize ball is generated on the basis of the fact that a winning at the special winning opening occurs during a big hit game based on a 10R certainty jackpot, a 6R certainty jackpot, or a 6R regular jackpot. The value of the number counter and the prize ball number display are updated. On the other hand, even during a big hit game, if a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the prize ball The number display is not updated either.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 082IWS672). In addition, the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs and suggests a set value that is currently set.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number indication suggestion effect (step 082IWS673). In addition, "the prize ball number indication suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning at the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. This is an effect that is executed at a timing when the number (456 pieces, 555 pieces, 666 pieces, 2456 pieces, 2555 pieces, 2666 pieces) in this example is reached, and suggests the set value that is currently set.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number emphasis effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number emphasis effect (step 082IWS674). The "award ball number enhancement effect" is the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on the fact that the player has won the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. (In this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) is an effect that is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is the special winning award winning designation command (step 082IWS675), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 082IWS676). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 082IWS677). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 082IWS678).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS675 to S678, in the present example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize balls are determined based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high-probability/second KT state and the special winning opening is won. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, The number of prize balls display is not updated (however, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit prize suggestion effect process for determining and executing a small hit prize suggestion effect (step 082IWS679). The "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when a small hit occurs in the high probability/second KT state and a special winning opening is won, and suggests the currently set setting value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 082IWS673 and executes the award ball number display suggesting effect process (step 082IWS673). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the award ball number enhancement effect process (step 082IWS674).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step 082IWS680), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received symbol designating command to the first empty space in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. In the storage area (step 082IWS681).

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step 082IWS682), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step 082IWS683).

If the received effect control command is the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize designation command (step 082IWS684), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first effective start prize designation command or the second effective start prize. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 082IWS685).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS680 to S685, in this example, when the start winning is generated, in the start winning command storage area, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the valid starting winning designating command (first valid starting) The winning designation command and the second effective start winning designation command) are stored in association with each other.

A first start-up winning command storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory and a second start-winning command storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory may be separately provided. Then, in this case, in the first start winning command storage area, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first effective starting winning designation command are stored in association with each other, and in the second starting winning command storage area, the symbol designation The command, the variation category command, and the second effective start winning award designation command may be stored in association with each other.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes processing of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 082IWS686). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS611.

(Suggestive production process when winning over)
FIG. 9-34 is a flow chart showing an over-winning suggestion process (step 082IWS672). In the over-prize suggestion process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 082IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 082IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the big winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the over-winning suggested effect. Using the over-winning suggested effect determination table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the over-winning suggested effect (step 082IWS303).

FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the over-winning suggested effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggested effect, over-winning suggested effect A, over-winning suggested effect B, over-winning suggested effect C, and over-winning effect. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestion effect D, the over-winning suggestion effect E, and the over-winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the present example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display (in this example, “+15” in the normal display color (white in this example)) is displayed on the image display device 5. Character display) is displayed and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-35, when the “over prize winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the “over-winning suggestion effect B” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound B different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the winning of the sound C different from the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over prize winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect F” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, different determination values are assigned depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the current set value is. In step 082IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615) and identifies the current set value. Then, the presence or absence and the type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value.

As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “2”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “6”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10%+8%+7%+5%+5%+5%=40%, 45% when the set value is “2”, 50% when the set value is “3”, and the set value When it is “4”, it is 55%, when it is the setting value “5”, it is 60%, and when it is the setting value “6”, it is 65%. As described above, in the present example, the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, so the ratio of determining execution of the over-winning suggesting effect becomes relatively high as compared with the small hit winning suggesting effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning time suggestion effect has been determined in step 082IWS303 (step 082IWS304). If the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a prize display according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS305). .. For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output winning sounds according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (step 082IWS306). For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 082IWS302) or when it is determined that there is no over-winning suggestion effect (N in step 082IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. In, the control for displaying the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) is performed (step 082IWS307). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 082IWS308).

(Small prize winning suggestion processing)
FIG. 9-36 is a flowchart of a small hit winning suggestive effect process (step 082IWS679). In the small hit winning suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the small hit prize suggesting effect. Then, the presence or absence of a small hit winning suggestion effect and the type are determined (step 082IWS321).

FIG. 9-37 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-37, in the small hit winning suggestive effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestive effect, small hit winning suggestive effect A, small hit winning suggestive effect B, small hit winning suggestive effect. A determination value is assigned to each of C, a small hit winning suggestion effect D, a small hit winning suggestion effect E, and a small hit winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 9-37, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 displays a prize in a normal display color (white in this example) (“+10” in this example). Character display) is displayed and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-37, when the “small hit winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker is displayed. The winning sound of the sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect B” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion C” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in a yellow display color and the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect F” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 9-37, different determination values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the current set value is. .. In step 082IWS321, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, based on the determined value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and the type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined.

As shown in FIG. 9-37, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A being determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "3", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F being determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the small hitting prize suggestive effect which is the sum of the small hit prize suggesting effects A to F Is 2%+1%+1%+1%=5%, 6% when the set value is “2”, 7% when the set value is “3”, and the set value is “4”. Is 8%, the setting value is “5”, it is 9%, and the setting value is “6”, it is 10%. As described above, in this example, as compared with the above-described over-winning time suggestive effect, the rate of determining execution of the small hit winning time suggestive effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect in step 082IWS321 (step 082IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the determined type of the small hit prize suggesting effect (step). 082IWS323). For example, when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is determined, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 082IWS324). For example, when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is decided, the speaker 8L, 8R is controlled to output the winning sound of the sound A.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect upon winning the small hit (N in step 082IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the prize display in the normal display color (white in this example). Control is performed (step 082IWS325). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 082IWS326).

The reliability of the set value suggestion may be different between when the over-winning suggestion effect is executed and when the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”, whereas the small hit It may be configured to determine that the set value is “6” when the prize suggestion effect F is executed. On the other hand, on the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”. On the other hand, if the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed, it may be determined that the set value is “6”.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect cause the display mode of the prize display (in this example, the display color) to be different from the normal one, and output a different winning sound from the normal one. Although the case is shown where it is executed according to an aspect, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by making only one of the display mode (display color in this example) of the prize display and the winning sound different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect or the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured as follows. Also, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, suggestive effects at the time of over-winning and small hit prizes The time suggestion effect may be configured to be executed.

(Award ball number indication suggestion processing)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process (step 082IWS673). In the award ball number display suggesting effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the award ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 082IWS341). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 082IWS341, for the production control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” (step 082IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and the lottery based on the random number. Processing is performed to determine whether or not the prize ball number display suggestive effect A is present (step 082IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball number display suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect A is executed, a character display such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect A is executed, at least the set value “4” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball counter has not reached 456 first (N in step 082IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter has first reached 555 ( Step 082 IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 082IWS344, for effect control If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 082IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not there is the prize ball number indication suggestion effect B. Is determined (step 082IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect B is executed, a character display such as “555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”. Therefore, if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed, at least the set value “5” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 555 first (N in step 082IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 666 ( Step 082IWS347). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 082IWS347, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” (step 082IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect C is present. It is determined (step 082IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect C is executed, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”, so if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed, the set value is “6”. It will be confirmed that there is.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 666 first (N in step 082IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2456 ( Step 082 IWS350). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 082IWS350, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465, the prize control CPU 120 determines It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” (step 082IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and whether or not the prize ball number suggestion effect D is present. Is determined (step 082IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect D is executed, a character display such as “2456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In addition, in this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value "4". Therefore, if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect D is executed, the set value "4". It is confirmed that the above is done.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 2456 first (N in step 082IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2555 ( Step 082IWS353). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Since the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 082IWS353 that the prize ball number counter value is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “5” or more (step 082IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball display indication effect determination table to determine whether the award ball number indication effect E is present. Is determined (step 082IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect E is executed, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value "5". Therefore, if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed, the set value "5" is set. It is confirmed that the above is done.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 2555 first (N in step 082IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2666 ( Step 082IWS356). In this example, 15 award balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 award balls if the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Since the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 082IWS356 if the prize ball counter value is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value "6" (step 082IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 082IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the prize ball number suggestion effect F is present. It is determined (step 082IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 9-39, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect F is executed, a character display such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the award number indication suggestion effect in steps 082IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 082IWS359). If the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the decided type of prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect (step 082IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “456 OVER”.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-39, when viewing the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the award ball number indication suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the setting value “4” or more is determined, the setting value “5” or more is determined, and the setting value “ 6” Accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set value is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-39, when viewed in the prize ball number display suggestive effects D to F executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is As the number of award balls increases and the number of award balls increases, the execution probability of the award number indication suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value The accuracy of confirming "5" or more and confirming the setting value "6" and setting value is increasing.

In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestive effect becomes higher. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, the precision of suggesting the set value may be lowered as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-39, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small hit RUSH. Although the case where the execution probabilities of the prize sphere number display suggesting effects are different from the effects D to F is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and is configured to execute the prize sphere number suggesting effects with the same execution probability. May be.

(Awards ball number emphasis production process)
FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasis effect process (step 082IWS674). In the prize ball number enhancement effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000). Is confirmed (step 082IWS371). In this example, if game balls are won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 082IWS371, for the production control. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold value for each 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and generates a random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed to determine the presence/absence of a prize ball number enhancement effect (step 082IWS372).

FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball number emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-41, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect A is executed, a character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize sphere emphasis effect B is executed, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect C is executed, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect E is executed, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 082IWS372 (step 082IWS373). If the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of prize sphere emphasis effect in the image display device 5 (step 082IWS374). For example, when it is determined to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “1000 OVER”.

In addition, in this example, the case where the award ball number emphasizing effect is configured to be executable when the number of award balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000 has been described. It is not limited to the mode. For example, not only in the case where the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed in all of these cases, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2000, and 3000. You may comprise. Further, for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasis effect may be configured to be executable, and various modes are possible.

As shown in FIG. 9-40 and FIG. 9-41, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, and has no relation to the current set value. It is a performance that is decided and executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, by changing the display mode of the prize sphere number emphasis effect, the prize sphere number emphasis effect may be configured to be executable in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the normal display color.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 9-42 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 082IWS811). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received may be confirmed by, for example, checking whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag (see step 082IWS618) is set in the command analysis process (step S75).

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special big hit display flag is set (step 082IWS812). If the special big hit display flag is set (that is, if the special big hit display is occurring and the special big hit display is being displayed), the process ends.

If the special jackpot display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 082IWS813). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 082IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #07. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 082IWS816).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 082IWS815). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 082IWS816).

By performing the processing of steps 082IWS813 to S816, in this characteristic portion 082IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. When executed, in the KT state, the variable display of the reduced decorative design and the display of the special design are performed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the second special design. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, The variable display of decorative designs, the variable display of reduced decorative designs, and the display of special designs are not performed.

(Variable display start setting process)
9-43 to 9-45 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the game state is the low probability/low base state (step 082IWS901). Whether the gaming state is the low-probability/low-base state can be determined by confirming that none of the high-probability state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (step 082IWS654, S658, S659, S662, S663, S666, S667).

If the game state is a low probability/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result (step 082IWS902). In step 082IWS902, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display is out of alignment), the effect control CPU 120 has only the left out or the left and right decorative designs in which the left, middle and right decorative designs are completely inconsistent. Determine the combination of out-of-match reach patterns. In addition, when the display result 2 designation command, the display result 3 designation command, and the display result 5 designation command are received (when it is determined that the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 2R certainty variation jackpot), the left middle right The decorative pattern is determined to be a combination of symbols arranged in odd numbers. Further, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command or the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined that the small hit A or the small hit B), the combination of the decorative designs of the small hit design (for example, "135") To decide.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol this time is a failure (step 082IWS903). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol this time is out of order is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. It can be determined by confirming that. If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 082IWS905. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 082IWS903), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value. (Step 082IWS904).

In Step 082IWS904, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see Step 082IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect, and the setting is performed. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the set value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-46, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in the display color of orange on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. The set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is "6", the execution ratio is highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the execution of the setting value suggestion effect if the setting value suggestion effect is determined. Select a process table according to (step 082IWS905). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If it is not the low probability/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the game state is the low probability/high base state (step 082IWS906). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the low probability/high base state can be determined by confirming that only the first KT state flag is set (step 082IWS654, S658, S659, S662, S663, S666, S666). (See S667).

If the game state is a low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (step 082IWS907). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a big hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the re-lottery effect (step 082IWS908). If it is not a big hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control selects a process table corresponding to an effect (for example, an effect of changing only the background image) in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed (step 082IWS909). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If it is not the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the high probability/high base state (step 082IWS910). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability/high-base state can be determined by confirming that the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag are set (step 082IWS654, S658, S659, S662, (See S663, S666, S667).

If the gaming state is a high probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result (step 082IWS911). The process of step 082IWS911 is the same as the process of step 082IWS902. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, a process table for displaying variation of the reduced decorative pattern according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used (step 082IWS912). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If it is not the high probability/high base state (that is, if it is the high probability/low base state), the effect control CPU 120 determines the special symbol according to the variation display result (step 082IWS913). FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 9-47, in the present example, in the case of deviating, a special pattern including a character “ha” in a small size circle (deviating special pattern) is determined. Further, in the case of a small hit A, a special design including a small character in a small size circle (small hit A special design) is determined. Further, when the small hit B is obtained, a special design including the small character in a large size circle (small hit B special design) is determined. In addition, when the 2R normal big hit, the special design including the character "tsu" in the small size circle (2R normal big hit special design) is determined. Further, when the 2R certainty variation big hit, a special design including the character "certain" in a small size circle (2R certainty variation big hit special design) is determined. Further, in the case of the 6R probability variable big hit, a special symbol including the character "certain" in the medium size circle (6R probability variable jackpot special symbol) is determined. Further, when the 10R certainty variation big hit, a special pattern including the character "certain" in a large size circle (10R certainty variation big hit special design) is determined.

The special symbol is not limited to the aspect shown in this example. For example, in the case of a big hit, a special pattern including the characters "large" may be uniformly displayed in a circle, and the big hit type may not be recognized. In addition, for example, instead of a design that includes characters such as "Kana", "Tsu", "Large", and "Small", a special pattern is a pattern composed of figures, symbols, and colors that correspond to big hits, small hits, and deviants. May be displayed as, and various modes are possible.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading notice effect executing flag indicating that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed is set (step 082IWS914). If the pre-reading notice production in progress flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading notice production is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the pre-reading notice production interruption flag indicating that the pre-read notice production is suspended. It is confirmed whether or not there is any (step 082IWS915). If the pre-reading announcement effect interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (step 082IWS916). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a big hit change, the CPU 120 for effect control selects a process table according to the change notice effect (step 082IWS917). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If it is not a big hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (step 082IWS918). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a small hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a small hit variation, the process proceeds to step 082IWS939.

If it is not a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prefetching announcement effect determination process for determining the presence and type of the prefetching announcement effect (step 082IWS919). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading notice effect executing flag is set (step 082IWS920). If the read-ahead preview effect execution flag is set (that is, if the execution of the read-ahead preview effect is determined), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the read-ahead preview effect (step 082IWS921). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If the pre-reading notice effect in-execution flag is not set (that is, if execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the variation notice effect (step 082IWS922). In step 082IWS922, the effect control CPU 120 uses the table for determining the presence/absence of the fluctuation notice effect to perform a lottery process based on a random number to determine the presence/absence of the fluctuation notice effect. Further, in the present example, it is determined in step 082IWS922 that the fluctuation advance notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the variation notice effect (step 082IWS923). When it is determined to execute the change notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the change notice effect (step 082IWS924). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943. If it is not decided to execute the fluctuation notice effect, the process proceeds to step 082IWS939.

When the pre-reading notice effect execution flag is set (that is, when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed (step 082IWS925). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, for example, a variation pattern command designating the variable display for the first special symbol is received, but the first symbol confirmation designation command is still received. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prefetching notice effect executing flag and also resets the lookahead notice effect number counter for counting the effect number of the prefetch notice effect. (Step 082IWS926). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS939.

In this example, since the look-ahead notice effect can be executed when the game state is in the high probability/low base state (second KT state), it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the execution of the prefetching notice production by executing the processing of steps 082IWS925 and S926, the prefetching notice production is forcibly terminated midway. ..

If the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (step 082IWS927). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol this time is a small hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a small hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the second reserved storage of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is a big hit (step 082IWS928). If the second reserved storage subject to advance notice is a big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 082IWS930. If the second reservation storage of the notice target is not a big hit (in the case of so-called gaze prefetch notice effect), the effect control CPU 120 sets the prefetch notice effect interruption flag (step 082IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the prefetching announcement effect (interruption) in a mode including interruption of the prefetching announcement effect (step 082IWS930). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

If it is not a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to a normal prefetching announcement effect (step 082IWS931). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

When the pre-reading notice production interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set pre-reading notice production interruption flag (step 082IWS932). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 082IWS933). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, for example, a variation pattern command designating the variable display for the first special symbol is received, but the first symbol confirmation designation command is still received. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prefetching announcement effect executing flag and also resets the prefetching announcement effect number counter (step 082IWS934). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS939.

By executing the processing in steps 082IWS933 and S934, even after the interruption of the so-called pre-reading notice effect of GASE, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading is performed. The notice production is forcibly terminated on the way.

If the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is ended (step 082IWS935). In step 082IWS935, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a table for determining whether or not to end the prefetch advance notice effect, and determines whether or not to end the prefetch advance notice effect. To do. Further, in this example, in step 082IWS935, it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is ended with a probability of 50%. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to end the prefetching announcement effect (step 082IWS936). When it is determined to end the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 resets the pre-reading notice effect executing flag and also resets the pre-reading notice effect number counter (step 082IWS937). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS939.

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS935 to S937, the prefetching notice production may be ended as it is after the interruption in the case of the so-called gaze prefetching notice production.

In this example, the so-called gaze pre-reading notice effect is interrupted and then the pre-reading notice effect may be terminated as it is. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the second reserved storage subject to advance notice is a big hit, the prefetch advance notice effect may be terminated after the interruption in the case of the prefetch advance notice effect at a low rate. Good.

Unless it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is to be ended, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the prefetching notice effect (step 082IWS938). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues (( Step 082IWS939).

FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-48, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, determination is made for each of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A and small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-48, in this example, the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is highest when the setting value is “1”, and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is “2”. The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is even higher when the execution ratio of is next and the setting value is “3”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is “4”. Is the next highest and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-48, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect A is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect B is shown. Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value "6". In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Note that, as described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in the present example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect has been determined (step 082IWS940). If it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 082IWS941). If it is not decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to a predetermined agitation effect (step 082IWS942). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS943.

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in steps 082IWS905, S908, S909, S912, S917, S921, S924, S930, S931, S938, S941, S942 to the process timer. The process timer is set and the process timer is started (step 082IWS943). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 082IWS944). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this example, when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state), step 082IWS944 and variable display effect production processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table selected in step 082IWS941. Thereby, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the step 082IWS944 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 082IWS941. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

In addition, in this example, when the gaming state is in the low probability/high base state (first KT state), step 082IWS944 and variable display during presentation processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table selected in step 082IWS909. Thereby, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not particularly executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and, for example, the effect of changing only the background image is executed. However, in the case of a big hit variation, the step 082IWS944 and the variable display effect production process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table selected in the step 082IWS908, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is in the middle of the execution period. The re-lottery effect is executed.

Further, in this example, when the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state (first KT state), step 082IWS944 and variable display during presentation processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table selected in step 082IWS912. By doing so, the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this example, when the reach occurs during the variable display of the reduced decorative design, the reduced decorative design is enlarged and displayed, and the display is switched to the variable display of the normal size decorative design.

Further, in this example, when the game state is in the high probability/low base state (second KT state), when the prefetching notice effect is executed, the step according to the process table selected in step 082IWS921, S931, S938 By performing the 082IWS944 and variable display during production processing (step S172), the variable display of the decorative symbol is not particularly executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the prefetching notice effect is executed. However, even if the pre-reading notice effect is executed, if there is a small hit variation, by executing the step 082IWS944 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) in accordance with the process table selected in step 082IWS930, A look-ahead notice effect including interruption is executed. In this case, the small hitting special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during execution of the pre-reading notice effect, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is interrupted while the small hit special symbol is displayed.

Further, in the case of executing the variation notice effect, by performing the step 082IWS944 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) according to the process table selected in steps 082IWS917 and S924, the variation display of the second special symbol The variation display of the decorative pattern is not executed during execution of, and the variation advance notice effect is executed.

In addition, when the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is decided, the step 082IWS944 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table selected in step 082IWS941, thereby the second special symbol During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not particularly executed, but the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in other cases, step 082IWS944 and the variable display intermediate effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table selected in step 082IWS942, so that the decoration symbol is particularly displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of is not executed, but the fanning effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 082IWS945). Next, the effect control CPU 120, the command at the time of starting winning stored in the first storage area of the command storing area at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a valid starting winning designation designating command (first effective). Start winning award designation command, second effective starting award designation command)), and shifts the contents of the starting winning award command storage area (step 076IWS946).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display effect effect process (step S172) (step 082IWS947).

(Pre-reading notice production decision process)
FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing the prefetching notice effect determination process (step 082IWS919). In the pre-reading notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 082IWS501). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, for example, a variation pattern command designating the variable display for the first special symbol is received, but the first symbol confirmation designation command is still received. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the prefetching notice effect determination process is ended as it is. Therefore, in this example, the processing after step 082IWS502 is executed on condition that the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, and the prefetching notice effect can be executed.

If the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 extracts all the symbol designating commands corresponding to the second reserved memory from the start winning command storage area (step 082IWS502). Specifically, all the symbol designating commands stored in association with the second effective starting winning award designating command are extracted from the symbol designating commands stored in the start winning award command storage area. In this example, since the process of step 082IWS501 is executed, the process moves to the process of step 082IWS502 on condition that the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, in step 082IWS502, the start winning award command storage area It should have stored only the command corresponding to the second hold storage.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a big hit in the second reserved memory before the latest second reserved memory, based on the extracted symbol designating command (step 082IWS503). If there is a big hit, the look-ahead notice effect determination process is ended as it is. Therefore, in this example, the processing after step 082IWS504 is executed on condition that there is no second holding storage that is a big hit before the second holding storage of the notice target, and the prefetching notice production can be executed.

If there is no big hit in the second hold storage before the latest second hold storage, the effect control CPU 120, based on the extracted symbol designating command, the latest second hold storage is the 10R probability variation big hit or It is confirmed whether or not it is a 2R probability variable big hit (step 082IWS504). If it is a 10R probability big hit or a 2R probability big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects the lookahead notice effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence and type of the lookahead notice effect (step 082IWS505).

If the latest second hold storage is neither 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 120, based on the extracted symbol designating command, the latest second hold storage is another jackpot (6R It is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit is 2R normal big hit (step 082IWS506). If it is another big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects the prefetch advance notice effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence and type of the prefetch advance notice effect (step 082IWS507).

If the latest second pending storage does not result in any other big hit (that is, if it is a small hit or a big hit), the effect control CPU 120 uses the lookahead table as a table for determining the presence and type of the lookahead notice effect. The notice production determination table C is selected (step 082IWS508).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the look-ahead notice effect determination table selected in steps 082IWS505, S507, and S508 to determine the presence and type of the look-ahead notice effect (step 082IWS509).

FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the prefetching notice effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-50(A) shows a specific example of the pre-reading notice effect determination table A selected in step 082IWS505. Further, FIG. 9-50(B) shows a specific example of the prefetch advance notice effect determination table B selected in step 082IWS507. Further, FIG. 9-50(C) shows a specific example of the pre-reading notice effect determination table C selected in step 082IWS508. As shown in FIG. 9-50, the pre-reading notice production determination table is assigned with determination values for no pre-reading notice production, execution of pre-reading notice production A, and execution of pre-reading notice production B.

In the present example, the “look-ahead notice effect A” is a look-ahead notice effect executed in a mode of semi-transparently displaying a symbol imitating a special symbol on the image display device 5. In addition, “pre-reading notice production B” is a pre-reading notice production which is executed in the mode of displaying the telop display on the image display device 5.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-50, the pre-reading notice effect B may be determined only for the pre-reading notice effect determination table A for the 10R probability variation big hit/2R probability variation big hit. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that a big hit based on the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs when the look-ahead announcement effect B is executed, and the high-probability/low-base state ( It is suggested to be controlled to the second KT state).

Note that the pre-reading notice effect B is executed at a low rate not only in the mode shown in this example but also in the case of other big hits (6R certainty variation big hit, 2R normal big hit), small hits, or even off. It may be configured to be performed.

In addition, in this example, the presence or absence and the type of the pre-reading notice effect are determined based on the symbol designating command in the winning determination result designation command (so-called pre-reading determination command), but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the presence/absence and type of the prefetch notice effect may be determined based on the variation category command.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the prefetching announcement effect (step 082IWS510). When it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets a pre-reading notice effect executing flag indicating that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step 082IWS511). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current second reserved storage number in the prefetching notice effect counter for counting the number of effects of the prefetching notice effect (step 082IWS512). It should be noted that in this example, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current number of second reserved memories is set in the prefetch notice effect counter, so that the second reserved memory that is one before the second reserved memory of the notice target is supported. The look-ahead notice effect is executed until the variable display is displayed.

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIGS. 9-51 and 9-52 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 082IWS8101) and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 082IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 082IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 082IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data which are set next (step 082IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 082IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 082IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 082IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 082IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol fixing designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 082IWS902 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 082IWS8109). And CPU120 for production control updates the value of the production control process flag to the value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 082IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 082IWS8106 (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2) Confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 082IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 082IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 082IWS8112). If the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is received, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop design of the decorative design if the stop design of the decorative design is determined in step 082IWS911 of the variable display start setting processing, A process of replacing with a missing pattern is performed (step 082IWS8113). In addition, if the special symbol is determined in step 082IWS913 of the variable display start setting process, the determined special symbol is replaced with the detached special symbol. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 082IWS8114).

If neither the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command nor the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step 082 IWS8108, N in S8112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the game state is a low probability/high base state. Is confirmed (step 082IWS8115). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the low probability/high base state can be determined by confirming that only the first KT state flag is set (step 082IWS654, S658, S659, S662, S663, S666, S666). (See S667).

In the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the operation timing of the movable body 32 when the re-lottery effect is executed (step 082IWS8116). Whether or not it is the operation timing of the movable body 32 can be determined by, for example, confirming the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer set in step 082IWS945 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the operation timing of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to operate the movable body 32 (step 082IWS8117). Then, the process proceeds to step 082IWS8129.

In this example, in the case of a big hit during the low probability/high base state, the process of step 082IWS8117 is executed and the movable body 32 is operated to notify the big hit, and then the re-lottery effect is executed, Finally, the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed whether the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a non-determination variation jackpot.

If it is not the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the game state is the high probability/low base state (step 082IWS8118). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability/low-base state can be determined by confirming that the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag are set (steps 082IWS654, S658, S659, S662,). (See S663, S666, S667).

If it is a high-probability/low-base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation notice effect is being executed (step 082IWS8119). If the variation notice effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (step 082IWS8120). If the push operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period of the variation notice effect has passed (step 082IWS8121).

If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 082IWS8120), or if the production period of the variation notice effect has passed (Y in step 082IWS8121), the variation of the second special symbol currently being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the display is a big hit (step 082IWS8122). If it is a big hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the image display device 5 to temporarily stop and display the big hit special symbol determined in step 082IWS913 (step 082IWS8123). If it is not a big hit variation (that is, if it is a deviation variation), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to temporarily stop and display the deviation special symbol determined in step 082IWS913 (step 082IWS8124).

If the variation notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the special symbol temporary stop display timing (step 082IWS8125). If it is the temporary stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol which is being executed this time is a small hit (step 082IWS8126). If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to temporarily stop and display the small hit special symbol determined in step 082IWS913 (step 082IWS8127). If it is not a small hit variation (that is, if it is a deviation variation), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to temporarily stop and display the deficit special symbol determined in step 082IWS913 (step 082IWS8128).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS8125 to S8128, in the present example, when neither the look-ahead notice effect nor the change notice effect is executed during the high-probability/low-base state, the predetermined display during the change display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the provisional stop display timing, the small hit special symbol and the off special symbol are temporarily displayed, and then the small hit special symbol and the off special symbol are fixedly displayed at the end of the fluctuation.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 082IWS8129). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 082IWS8130). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 082IWS8131).

In this example, as already described, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and when the variable display of the first special symbol that is a deviant or sure variation big hit is being executed, During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command, the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 082IWS8129, which means that the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. This is the case when it is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 082IWS8130 and S8131 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variable time timer is restarted, and finally the variable display of one special symbol ends. Until it is done, the standby production is continued. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the left, right, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped in a swinging or slightly varying state.

(Waiting process for special maps)
FIG. 9-53 and FIG. 9-54 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 082IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, it proceeds to step 082IWS9706. In this characteristic part 082IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 082IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the big hit mid effect has not yet been executed, the process for displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 082IWS9703 is executed. Without executing, the process proceeds to Step 082IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 082IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 082IWS9721. In this characteristic part 082IW, when the small hitting symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 082IWS9720. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 082IWS9703 is displayed. Without executing the processing, moves to Step 082IWS9721.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120, when the decorative symbol is displayed, on the left middle right of the image display device 5 during the stop display. The control for finalizing and displaying the stop design (outlier design, big hit design, small hit design) of the decorative design is performed (step 082IWS9703). In the case of the high probability/low base state, in step 082IWS9703, control is performed to confirm and display the special symbol being temporarily stopped and displayed. It should be noted that when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with a deviation symbol is executed in steps 082IWS8109 and S8113, in step 082IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120, the deviation symbol The control to confirm is displayed.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 082IWS9703 (Y in step 082IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 082IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit start designation command has been received (step 082IWS9706). When the big hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 082IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS9708). If the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of big hit that has occurred this time is a 10R certainty change big hit, a 6R certainty change big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step 082IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, or the 6R regular jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS9708 to S9710, in the present example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R certainty jackpot, the 6R certainty jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 082IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 082IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 082IWS9713).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 082IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 082IWS9703 (N of step 082IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prefetching notice effect number counter is 0 (step 082IWS9715). If the value of the pre-reading notice production counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading notice production counter (step 082IWS9716). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prefetching notice effect number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 082IWS9717). If the value of the pre-reading notice production counter after the subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 120 resets the pre-reading notice production execution flag (step 082IWS9718), and ends the pre-reading notice production.

Next, when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 082IWS9703 (Y in step 082IWS9719), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 082IWS9720).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 082IWS9721). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 082IWS9722).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the small hit (step 082IWS9723). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 082IWS9724), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the production component) is executed (step 082IWS9725).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during small hit (step S174) (step 082IWS9726).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the processing of step 082IWS9703 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 082IWS9704 and N in step 082IWS9719), the CPU 120 for effect control, effect control The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 082IWS9727).

(Ending production process)
9-55 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 082IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 082IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 082IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 082IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5 , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 082IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 082IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 082IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 082IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 082IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a 6R sure-change big hit or a big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit (step). 082IWS958). Whether the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit is whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command, for example. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation big hit or a 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS958 to S959, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the number of prize balls is displayed during the big hit game, and the big hit When the game is over, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state after the jackpot game is over.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit (step 082IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 082IWS960 to S962, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (however, In this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit is displayed, the number of prize balls is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), a high probability after the big hit game ends. / During the second KT state, the number of prize balls is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 082IWS963). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command. If 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is controlled to high probability/high base state after the end of this big hit game), the effect control CPU 120 reduces the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5. Control to change to a symbol is performed (step 082IWS964). If it is not 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is controlled to a low probability/high base state or a high probability/low base state after the end of this big hit game), the effect control CPU 120 displays on the image display device 5. Control is performed to erase the decorative pattern to be displayed (step 082IWS965).

In this example, when the gaming state is a low probability/low base state, the image display device 5 is controlled to a low probability/low base state effect mode in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed, but it is a big hit. When occurs, the processes of steps 082IWS963 to S965 are executed to control the production mode according to the gaming state after the big hit game. Specifically, when the high probability/high base state is controlled, the process of step 082IWS964 is executed, and the variable display of the reduced decorative design is executed on the image display device 5 in the high probability/high base state effect mode. Controlled by. Further, in the case of controlling to a low probability/high base state or a high probability/low base state, the process of step 082IWS965 is executed, and a low probability/high base state effect mode or high probability in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed. / Controlled to low base state effect mode. However, in the high probability/low base state effect mode, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not displayed, but instead, the temporary stop display and the finalized display of the special symbol are performed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 082IWS966).

(Irregular fluctuation handling)
FIG. 9-56 is a flowchart showing irregular variation handling processing (step 082IWS209). In the irregular variation handling process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the special big hit display standby flag indicating that the special big hit display is on standby is set (step 082IWS551). If the special jackpot display standby flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 082IWS552). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received may be confirmed by, for example, checking whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag (see step 082IWS618) is set in the command analysis process (step S75).

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the game state is the KT state (step 082IWS553). Whether the gaming state is the KT state or not can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control resets the variation pattern command reception flag that has been set.

If it is not the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 082IWS554). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, for example, whether the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the first special symbol is confirmed. It can be determined by If the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol (irregular fluctuation) is executed), the process proceeds to step 082IWS556.

If it is in the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 082IWS555). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the second special symbol. It can be determined by If not performing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, if performing the variable display of the first special symbol (irregular variation)), the process proceeds to step 082IWS556.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the irregular variation is a big hit (step 082IWS556). If the irregular variation is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a variation display currently being executed (step 082IWS557). If there is no variable display currently being executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a special big hit display on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS558). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as "big hit ready". Further, when the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the decorative design (step 082IWS559). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special big hit display flag indicating that the special big hit display is being displayed (step 082IWS560).

On the other hand, if there is a variable display currently being executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special big hit display standby flag (step 082IWS561).

If the special jackpot display standby flag is set (Y in step 082IWS551), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a variable display currently being executed (step 082IWS562). If there is a variable display that is currently being executed, the processing ends. If there is no variable display currently being executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the special jackpot display on the image display device 5 (step 082IWS563). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as "big hit ready". Further, when the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the decorative design (step 082IWS564). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special big hit display flag (step 082IWS565). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control resets the special jackpot display standby flag (step 082IWS566).

By performing the above processing, when the irregular big hit occurs, the display of the special big hit display is immediately started unless there is the currently displayed change display (the change display of the other special symbol). Further, when there is a variable display currently being executed (variable display of the other special symbol), the special jackpot display is started after waiting for the variable display to end.

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of a performance mode of the performance executed in the present characteristic part 082IW. First, the presentation mode of the set value suggestion production will be described. FIG. 9-57 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of the set value suggestive production. In this example, the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As illustrated in FIG. 9-57(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being performed on the image display device 5, when the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect is reached, FIG. ) To (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-57 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggesting effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images 082IW001, 082IW002, 082IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B1), the predetermined character image 082IW001 is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 so as to be set. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 082IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B3), the set value is set according to a mode in which the predetermined character image 082IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-57, the case where the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E are executed is shown. However, for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-58(A), for example, a character display 082IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-58(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-58 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-58 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined effect images 082IW005 and 082IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 082IW005 and 082IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (B1), the predetermined effect image 082IW005 is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (B2), a predetermined effect image 082IW005 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed or the effect image of any display color is displayed and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, a description will be given of effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. 9-59 and FIG. 9-60 are explanatory views for explaining the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. Note that in FIGS. 9-59 and 9-60, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-59 and 9-60, the case where the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the 10R certainty variation big hit has been shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-59(A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "Big hit!" and a round number display such as "Round 2". The number of prize balls display 082IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (non-over winning) to the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (B), the normal display color (white in this example) is displayed. 082IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 082IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-59(C), the winning display 082IW010 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output winning sounds according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 082IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the blue sound is displayed on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-59(D), the character display 082IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed (see step 082IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect B is decided, “555” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is determined, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-60(E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big hit game is finished. Further, when the high probability/second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-60(F), a character display such as “small hit RUSH medium!” is displayed, and the number of prize balls display 082IW008 continues. Will be displayed.

Next, in the high-probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won into the special winning opening, but when the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is not decided, the process shown in FIG. As shown in (F), the winning display 082IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 082IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a special game ball is won in the special winning opening. It has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-60(G), the winning display 082IW013 (in this example, the character display of “+10”) corresponding to the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is displayed and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, the winning sound corresponding to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 082IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in the blue display color.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls has reached 2666 during the high-probability/second KT state, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect F has been decided based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-60(H), the character display 082IW014 such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F is executed (see step 082IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect D is determined, “2456” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as “OVER” is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect E is decided, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect E is executed.

Although illustration is omitted in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-59 and 9-60, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 1000. In this case, the character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number enhancement effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number enhancement effect B is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2000, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3000, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect D is decided based on the number of prize spheres reaching 4000, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect E is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 5000, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a big hit game or a high probability/small hit in the second KT state) Although the case where the prize ball number display suggesting effects A to F are executed at different selection rates according to the total of the game value given by) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times that the variable display is executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are selected at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are possible.

Next, an effect mode during the low probability/high base state will be described. FIG. 9-61 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode in a low-probability/high-base state. In FIG. 9-61, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... As shown in FIG. 9-61(A), in this example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the low-probability/high-base state, and in principle, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Not done.

Further, in the present example, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a small symbol display area 082IW020 for displaying the left middle right small symbol, and the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 082IW021a for doing and a fourth symbol display area 082IW021b for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are provided. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-61(A), even in the low-probability/high-base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the left middle in the small symbol display area 082IW020 The variable display of the small symbol on the right is executed (see step 082IWS208), and the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 082IW021b is executed (see step 082IWS207).

Further, in this example, in principle, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the low-probability/high-based state, but when the variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display which is a big hit, the variation display of FIG. As shown in 61(B), the movable body 32 is operated during the variable display of the second special symbol, and it is informed that it is a big hit (see step 082IWS8117). However, at this stage, it is only possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a big hit, and it is not possible to recognize whether it will be a probabilistic big jackpot (10R sure jackpot, a 6R probable jackpot, a 2R probable jackpot) or an indeterminate jackpot (2R regular jackpot).

Next, when the operation of the movable body 32 is finished, as shown in FIG. 9-61(C), the image display device 5 displays the left-middle-right decorative design and the variable display is started, and the re-lottery effect is produced. Be started. Then, when the variable time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-61(D), the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol is fixedly displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, when the probability variation big hit, the probability variation pattern (for example, an odd number pattern) is stopped and displayed as the left middle right decoration pattern, and when it becomes the non-probability variation big hit, the non-probability variation pattern as the left middle right decoration pattern (For example, even-numbered symbols) are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to recognize whether the probability variation is a big hit or the non-determination variation pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 9-61(D), the jackpot pattern of the probability variation symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is confirmed and displayed, and it is shown that the probability variation jackpot is notified. ing.

Next, an effect mode during the high probability/high base state will be described. FIG. 9-62 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode during the high-probability/high-base state. In addition, in FIG. 9-62, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). As shown in FIG. 9-62(A), in this example, in the high-probability/high-base state, the variable display 082IW022 of the reduced decorative pattern is basically executed in the image display device 5.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-62(A), even in the high probability/high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in the small symbol display area 082IW020 The variable display of the small symbol on the left middle right is executed (see step 082IWS208), and the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 082IW021b is executed (see step 082IWS207).

In this example, in principle, the reduced display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the high probability/high base state. However, in the case where the reach occurs during the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern, the display in FIG. As shown in (B), the reduced decorative design is enlarged and displayed, and the display is switched to the variable display of the normal size decorative design. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-62(C), the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 9-62(C), the jackpot pattern of the probability variation symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is confirmed and displayed, and it is shown that the probability variation jackpot is notified. ing.

Next, an effect mode during the high probability/low base state will be described. FIG. 9-63 to FIG. 9-65 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect mode during the high probability/low base state. Note that in FIGS. 9-63 to 9-65, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... As shown in FIG. 9-63(A), in this example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the low-probability/high-base state, and in principle, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Not done.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-63(A), even in the high probability/high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, in the small symbol display area 082IW020. The variable display of the small symbol on the left middle right is executed (see step 082IWS208), and the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 082IW021b is executed (see step 082IWS207).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-63(A), it is determined that the prefetching notice effect A is executed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol, and the execution of the prefetching notice effect A is started in the image display device 5. To do. As shown in FIG. 9-63(A), when the pre-reading notice effect A is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the pre-reading notice effect is displayed in a mode in which the pattern 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is displayed semitransparently. A is executed.

In this example, as the design 082IW023 simulating the special design of the big hit, the case where the design including the character "Large" in a large size circle is displayed semi-transparently is not limited to such a mode. For example, a figure imitating a 10R probability variation big hit special symbol (see FIG. 9-47) may be displayed semitransparently, and various modes can be considered as the prefetching notice effect A.

In this example, when the deviation variation ends as the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-63(B), the semitransparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is continued, and the deviation special symbol. Is not displayed, and the prefetching notice effect A is continuously executed. It should be noted that it may be configured to display the detached special symbol at a position that does not disturb the semitransparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit such as the end of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-63(C), it is assumed that the next variable display of the second special symbol is started and the variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display which is a small hit. In this case, when it comes to the temporary stop display timing of the special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit special symbol 082IW024 is temporarily displayed on the image display device 5 (see step 082IWS8127), and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When is finished, as shown in FIG. 9-63(D), the small hit special symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-63(D), while the small hit special symbol 082IW024 is temporarily stopped and confirmed, the semi-transparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is interrupted, and the prefetch notice is given. Performance A is interrupted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64(E), it is assumed that the next variable display of the second special symbol is started. In this case, in the case where the second reserved memory of the notice target is a big hit, or when it is not decided to end the prefetch notice effect even if the second reserved memory of the notice target is other than the big hit, As shown in −64(E), the semi-transparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is restarted, and the prefetching notice effect A is restarted.

Then, when the deviation variation ends as the variation display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-64(F), the semitransparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is continued, and the deviating special symbol is displayed. Not done. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 9-64(F), it is assumed that the variable display corresponding to the second pending storage up to one before the second pending storage of the preview target is finished, and the prefetching notice effect A is finished. (See steps 082IWS9715 to S9718).

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the second reserved storage of the notice target is started, when the variation notice effect is executed, the prefetch notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-64(G). In the same manner as A, the semi-transparent display of the symbol 082IW023 imitating the special symbol of the big hit is started, and the variation notice effect is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-64(G), on the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 082IW025 including an image simulating the push button 31B and a character display of “press!” is displayed. Then, when the push button 31B is pressed during the execution of the change notice effect, the special symbol is temporarily displayed (see steps 082IWS8123 and S8124), and when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, FIG. As shown at −64 (H), the special symbol that is temporarily stopped is fixedly displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-64(H), it is a case of 10R certainty variation big hit, and the case where the 10R certainty variation big hit special symbol 082IW026 is temporarily stopped and confirmed is shown in the image display device 5.

When the look-ahead notice effect A is interrupted due to a small hit change, if the second reserved memory of the notice target is something other than a big hit, the look-ahead notice is started when the next change display of the second special symbol is started. It may be determined to end the effect (see steps 082IWS935 to S937). In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-65(E)′, even when the next variable display of the second special symbol is started, the semi-transparent display of the symbol 082IW023 simulating the special symbol of the big hit is not restarted, and prefetching is performed. The notice production A is ended as it is.

9-63 to 9-65 show the case of performing the prefetching notice effect A, but in this example, when the prefetching notice effect B is determined as the type of the prefetching notice effect, the prefetch notice effect is determined. B may be executed. FIG. 9-66 is an explanatory view showing another example of the prefetching notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-66, when the pre-reading notice effect B is executed, the pre-reading is performed by the mode in which the telop display 082IW027 including the character display such as “Big hit approaching!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The notice production B is executed.

It should be noted that the presentation mode of the look-ahead notice production is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the present example, when the pre-reading notice effect B in the mode of displaying the telop display is executed, the high probability/low base state (second KT state) is controlled again with the 10R certainty variation big hit and the 2R certainty variation big hit. Although a case is shown, for example, when a pre-reading notice effect that displays a telop in a rainbow display mode is executed, the high probability/low base state (second KT state) may be controlled again. ..

Further, for example, when a telop display is displayed in the look-ahead notice effect, if the look-ahead notice effect is continuously executed even in the next variable display, the special symbol and the telop display are displayed in parallel and the telop display is performed. May be continuously displayed, and when the look-ahead notice effect is not executed in the next variable display, the telop display may be deleted when the special symbol is displayed.

Further, for example, an effect of changing the background image may be executed as the prefetching notice effect, and various effect modes are conceivable as the prefetching notice effect.

Further, when displaying the telop display in the prefetch notice effect, various modes can be considered as the timing of erasing the telop display, and for example, the telop display may be erased at the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, The telop display may be erased at the timing when the special symbol is subsequently confirmed and displayed, and the telop display may be erased at the start of the next variable display.

As described above, according to this characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, small hit game state). It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a high probability/low base state (second KT state)) in which a game value is easily added depending on the special state. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state and execute the variable display in response to the determination. In addition, before the determination, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and in the special state, based on the determination result, it is changed to the advantageous state during execution of the variable display executed before the target variable display. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect) that suggests the control. Further, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, display of a small hit special symbol shown in FIG. 9-63(D)) corresponding to being controlled to the special state. Also, the control of the special state ends corresponding to the control of the advantageous state. When the special effect is executed during the execution of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect may be executed in the variable display after the special effect and the predetermined effect may not be executed in the variable display after the special effect (FIG. 9). -64(E) and Figures 9-65(E)'). Therefore, when the predetermined effect suggests the end of control of the special state, it is possible to focus on whether or not the special effect is executed and the predetermined effect is continuously executed. Can be improved.

Further, in particular, in the feature part 082IW, when an advantageous state (big hit game state) occurs during a special state (high probability/low base state (second KT state)), the special state may end. However, if the predetermined effect (pre-reading notice effect) is not executed in the variable display after the special effect, the continuation of the special state is decided rather, so it is possible to give the player a sense of relief, It is possible to improve the interest in the game regarding the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. .. Further, as the special state, it is possible to control the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is frequently executed and the special state is frequently controlled based on the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special information). The variation time of the variation pattern selected when changing the design is shorter in the KT state than in the non-KT state (normal state), and in the KT state, the number of variations for a certain period of time is longer than in the non-KT state (normal state). High percentage). Further, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect on condition that the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the predetermined effect is impaired.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, it is configured not to start the prefetch notice effect, or when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the execution of the prefetch notice effect. Indicates a case where the prefetching notice effect is forcibly ended, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the variation time of the variable display of the interrupted first special symbol is extremely long, and the pre-reading notice production ends before the change display of the first special symbol ends, the continuity of the pre-reading notice production is impaired. Since there is no possibility that the situation will occur, the prefetching notice effect may be continuously executed.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit A and small hit B). Further, it is possible to execute special effects in different effect modes corresponding to the types of special states (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-47, in the small hit A, the small hit A special symbol is displayed, and in the small hit B. Small hit B special pattern is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the effect mode of the special effect.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special winning opening is different between the small hit A and the small hit B (0.8 seconds and 1.8 seconds) is shown, but the embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be different between the small hit A and the small hit B (for example, once and twice). In this way, it is sufficient that the small hit A and the small hit B have different advantages in some form.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-47, a case where the display sizes of the small hit A special symbol and the small hit B special symbol are different is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hitting A special design and the small hitting B special design may have different display colors or different shapes of graphics, as long as the display mode is different in some form.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Further, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect shown in (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 9-57) that gives an indication regarding the set value. Therefore, by making a suggestion regarding the set value, the interest in the game can be improved.

The mode of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when displaying the small hitting special design, by displaying different kinds of small hitting special designs depending on which of the setting values "1" to "6", the setting value is suggested. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 2R certainty big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit). Further, it is possible to control to a special state after the control of a specific type of advantageous state (for example, 10R certainty variation big hit) is finished. In addition, a first predetermined effect (for example, pre-reading notice effect B) that suggests control to a specific type of advantageous state and a second predetermined effect (for example, pre-reading notice effect A) in which it is difficult to specify the type of advantageous state are executed. It is possible. Therefore, attention can be paid to the type of predetermined effect.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. .. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a specific state that is a gaming state different from the advantageous state and that can perform variable display (for example, a low probability/high base state ( The first KT state)) and a non-specific state (for example, low probability/low base state (normal state)) can be controlled. In addition, among a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, low probability/low base state effect mode, low probability/high base state effect mode, high probability/high base state edit mode, high probability/low base state effect mode) It is possible to control to one of the effect modes. In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit), and that specific condition is satisfied (for example, completion of 50 times of variable display). ), it is possible to control from a specific state to a non-specific state. Then, in the non-specific state, a predetermined effect mode (for example, a variable display of decoration identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to a variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (for example, For example, it is possible to control to a low probability/low base state effect mode) and to control to a special effect mode (for example, low probability/high base state effect mode) in which the decoration identification information is not displayed in the specific state. Therefore, appropriate display control can be realized in response to changes in the gaming state. Further, it is possible to simplify the control of switching between displaying and hiding the decoration identification information.

Further, in particular, in the case where the characteristic part 082IW is controlled to the low-probability/high-base state, the low-probability/high-base state is terminated and the low-probability/low-base state is terminated when the variable display of 50 times is finished. Although it is controlled to (normal state), the variable display of the second special symbol is not necessarily controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) by being executed 50 times, and the first special symbol is not always controlled. It is possible that the variable display is performed 50 times including the variable display (irregular variation) and the low probability/low base state (normal state) is controlled. In this case, in the low probability/high base state, it may be possible to configure the variable display of the decorative symbol to correspond to the variable display of the second special symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol (irregular variation) ) Interrupts and is executed, the number of executions of the variable display of the apparent decorative pattern and the transition to the low probability/low base state (normal state) do not match, and there is a possibility that an erroneous recognition may occur in production. Therefore, in the characteristic part 082IW, the decorative symbol is hidden in the low-probability/high-base state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is configured not to be executed, thereby displaying the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured to reduce the production control load for the decorative pattern when it is configured to be executable at the same time, and to avoid the occurrence of erroneous recognition in production.

In this example, the case where the decorative pattern is hidden during the low probability/high base state or during the high probability/low base state (however, the special symbol is displayed in the high probability/low base state) is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the decorative pattern may be hidden even during the high probability/high base state. As such, various states can be considered as the specific state.

In addition, in this example, in the KT state (low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), it is configured such that mainly the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a low probability/high base state or a high probability/high base state (first KT state), it is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) Only in the case, the variable display of the second special symbol may be mainly executed. In this case, for example, on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 17, instead of the variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, a variable winning ball device having a first starting winning port is provided, and The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to include a winning ball device having a second starting winning port on the left side. In the low-probability/high-base state and the high-probability/high-base state (first KT state), it is controlled to the high base state, so that it is easy to win the variable winning ball device (first starting winning opening), and mainly the first winning prize. The variable display of the special symbol is executed, and in the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), it is in the low-base state, so the variable winning ball device (first starting winning opening) is less frequently opened, and the winning ball device (first 2 start winning a prize hole), and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed mainly. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control in response to a change in the game state, and simplify control of switching between display and non-display of the decoration identification information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to execute variable display of the decoration identification information (for example, the decorative pattern). Further, in the specific state, the decoration identification information can be displayed when the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 9-61(C) is executed). Therefore, even in the specific state, the display result of the variable display can be appropriately notified when the advantageous state is controlled.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 082IW, regardless of whether or not it is in the specific state, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information (for example, small design, fourth design) whose visibility is lower than the decoration identification information. is there. Therefore, the game status can be grasped regardless of the game status.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) which is a state different from the advantageous state, and a special state in which a game value is easily given by the special state (for example, a high probability). /Low base state (second KT state) can be controlled. Therefore, by controlling in a specific state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 2R certainty big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit). Further, in the case where the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display (for example, irregular variation) of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to execute a common special effect (for example, a special big hit display) regardless of the type, and the decoration identification information is not displayed during the execution of the special effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding when the advantageous display is controlled based on the variable display of the identification information which does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, an advantageous state (for example, big hit) based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, big hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. It can be controlled to a game state). Further, after the execution of the special effect, it is possible to execute a promotion effect (for example, a launch promotion notification) that prompts the player to perform an action in response to the specific display result being derived and displayed. Therefore, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player's operation.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, after the special effect is executed, it is possible to control to an advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the specific region (for example, the passage gate 41). Therefore, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the advantageous state can be appropriately controlled.

Further, according to the characteristic part 082IW, the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be determined. In addition, depending on the game state, as the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display period of the variable display of the second identification information, different variable display periods are determined at different ratios (for example, FIG. 9-7). ~ As shown in FIG. 9-9, for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol, a variation pattern in which different variation times are set is provided, and for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol, The variation pattern is determined at different rates. Therefore, the variable display period of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be appropriately determined according to the gaming state.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel;
Advantageous state control means capable of controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Specific state control means capable of controlling in a specific state and a non-specific state capable of executing variable display in a game state different from the advantageous state,
Equipped with a production mode control means capable of controlling in any one of a plurality of production modes,
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition,
It is possible to control from the specific state to the non-specific state based on the establishment of a specific condition,
The effect mode control means,
In the non-specific state, it is possible to control to a predetermined effect mode in which the decoration display information is variably displayed in correspondence with one of the first display information and the second display information.
In the specific state, it is possible to control to a special effect mode in which decoration identification information is not displayed.

Images